blob: 0ad1f47d2dc77ee472656fbbfce1afb08d1e3a6f [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050087struct device;
88
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040089/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020090 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
91 *
92 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010093 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020094 */
95enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020096 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010097 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020098};
99
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200100#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
101
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200102/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800103 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
108 */
109enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
110 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
111 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
113 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
114};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200115#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800116
117/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400118 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
119 *
120 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100121 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400122 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400123 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200124 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
125 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400126 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100127 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300128 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200129 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400130 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700131struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200132 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100133 u16 cw_min;
134 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300136 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200137 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700138};
139
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700140struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
141 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
143 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
144 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
145};
146
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100147/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200148 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
153 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200155 */
156enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200162};
163
164/**
165 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
166 *
167 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
168 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
169 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100170 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200171 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200183 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200184
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
186
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100187 bool radar_enabled;
188
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100189 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190};
191
192/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
194 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
195 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
196 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
197 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
198 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
199 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
200 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
201 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
202 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
203 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
204 * for changes/removal.)
205 */
206enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
207 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
208 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
209};
210
211/**
212 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
213 *
214 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
215 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
216 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
217 * done.
218 *
219 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
220 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
221 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
222 */
223struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
227};
228
229/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100230 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
231 *
232 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
233 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
234 *
235 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
236 * also implies a change in the AID.
237 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
238 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300239 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700240 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200241 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200242 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200243 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
244 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
245 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
246 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
247 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
248 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200249 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200250 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300251 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200252 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
253 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200254 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200255 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200256 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300257 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200258 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100259 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
260 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300261 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
262 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100263 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
264 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
265 * context had been assigned.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100266 */
267enum ieee80211_bss_change {
268 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
269 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
270 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300271 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200272 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200273 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200274 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200275 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
276 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
277 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200278 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200279 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300280 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200281 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200282 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300283 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200284 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300285 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200286 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100287 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300288 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100289 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200290
291 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100292};
293
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300294/*
295 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
296 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
297 * filtering will be disabled.
298 */
299#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
300
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100301/**
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700302 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - RSSI threshold event
303 * An indicator for when RSSI goes below/above a certain threshold.
304 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi crossed the high threshold set by the driver.
305 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi crossed the low threshold set by the driver.
306 */
307enum ieee80211_rssi_event {
308 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
309 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
310};
311
312/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100313 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
314 *
315 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
316 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
317 *
318 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200319 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
320 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530321 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100322 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
323 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200324 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
325 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
326 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
327 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
328 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
329 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100330 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200331 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300332 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200333 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100334 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
335 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
336 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
337 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
338 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.)
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200339 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
340 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100341 * (see @sync_tsf)
342 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
343 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700344 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800345 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200346 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
347 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
348 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300349 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100350 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200351 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
352 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100353 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
354 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100355 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200356 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200357 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
358 * implies disabled
359 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300360 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
361 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
362 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
363 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100364 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
365 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
366 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200367 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200368 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
369 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
370 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300371 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
372 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200373 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300374 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
375 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200376 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100377 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100378 */
379struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200380 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100381 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200382 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530383 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100384 u16 aid;
385 /* erp related data */
386 bool use_cts_prot;
387 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300388 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200389 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800390 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700391 u16 beacon_int;
392 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200393 u64 sync_tsf;
394 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100395 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100396 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300397 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100398 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200399 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200400 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
401 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100402 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300403 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100404 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200405 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200406 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300407 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300408 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
409 size_t ssid_len;
410 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200411 int txpower;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100412 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100413};
414
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800415/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200416 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800417 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700418 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800419 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100420 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200421 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
422 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
423 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
424 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
425 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
426 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
427 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
428 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
429 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
430 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
431 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200432 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200433 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
434 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200435 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200436 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
437 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200438 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200439 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200440 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
441 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
442 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
443 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
444 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
445 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
446 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
447 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200448 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
449 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
450 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300451 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
452 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200453 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
454 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
455 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600456 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
457 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
458 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100459 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
460 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
461 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200462 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
463 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200464 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
465 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100466 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
467 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
468 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200469 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
470 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
471 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
472 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100473 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
474 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
475 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100476 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
477 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
478 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200479 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
480 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
481 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400482 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200483 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
484 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100485 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
486 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
487 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
488 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200489 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
490 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
491 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530492 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
493 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
494 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200495 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
496 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
497 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200498 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
499 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530500 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
501 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
502 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200503 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
504 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
505 * monitor injection).
Felix Fietkaud6d23de2013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200506 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
507 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200508 *
509 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
510 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800511 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200512enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200513 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200514 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
515 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
516 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
517 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
518 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
519 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
520 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
521 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
522 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
523 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
524 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
525 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600526 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100527 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200528 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200529 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100530 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200531 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100532 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100533 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200534 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400535 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200536 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100537 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200538 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530539 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200540 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530541 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200542 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Felix Fietkaud6d23de2013-06-04 12:15:42 +0200543 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200544};
545
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200546#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
547
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200548/**
549 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
550 *
551 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
552 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
553 *
554 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
555 */
556enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
557 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
558};
559
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200560/*
561 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
562 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
563 */
564#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
565 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
566 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
567 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
568 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100569 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200570 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200571 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200572
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530573/**
574 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
575 * Rate Control algorithm.
576 *
577 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
578 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
579 *
580 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
581 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
582 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
583 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
584 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100585 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
586 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530587 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
588 * Greenfield mode.
589 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100590 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
591 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
592 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530593 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
594 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
595 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
596 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
597 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200598enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
599 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
600 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
601 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
602
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100603 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200604 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
605 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
606 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
607 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
608 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100609 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
610 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
611 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800612};
613
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200614
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200615/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
616#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200617
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200618/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
619#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
620
621/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200622#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200623
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200624/* maximum number of rate table entries */
625#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
626
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200627/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200628 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200629 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200630 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
631 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200632 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200633 *
634 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
635 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
636 *
637 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
638 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200639 *
640 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
641 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
642 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
643 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
644 * information
645 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
646 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
647 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
648 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
649 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
650 * information should then contain
651 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
652 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
653 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200654 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200655struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
656 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100657 u16 count:5,
658 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000659} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200660
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100661#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
662
663static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
664 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
665{
666 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200667 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
668 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100669}
670
671static inline u8
672ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
673{
674 return rate->idx & 0xF;
675}
676
677static inline u8
678ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
679{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200680 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100681}
682
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200683/**
684 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200685 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200686 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
687 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
688 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
689 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
690 *
691 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200692 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200693 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100694 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700695 * @control: union for control data
696 * @status: union for status data
697 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100698 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700699 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100700 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700701 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200702 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200703 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200704struct ieee80211_tx_info {
705 /* common information */
706 u32 flags;
707 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200708
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200709 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100710
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100711 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100712
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200713 union {
714 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200715 union {
716 /* rate control */
717 struct {
718 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
719 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
720 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200721 u8 use_rts:1;
722 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200723 u8 short_preamble:1;
724 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200725 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200726 };
727 /* only needed before rate control */
728 unsigned long jiffies;
729 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200730 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
732 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200733 u32 flags;
734 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200735 } control;
736 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200737 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200738 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200739 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100740 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200741 u8 antenna;
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200742 void *status_driver_data[21 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200743 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200744 struct {
745 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
746 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200747 u8 pad[4];
748
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200749 void *rate_driver_data[
750 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
751 };
752 void *driver_data[
753 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200754 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700755};
756
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300757/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200758 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
759 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200760 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
761 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
762 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200763 *
764 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
765 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
766 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
767 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
768 */
769struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
770 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
771 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
772 const u8 *common_ies;
773 size_t common_ie_len;
774};
775
776
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200777static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
778{
779 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
780}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400781
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200782static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
783{
784 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
785}
786
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200787/**
788 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
789 *
790 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
791 *
792 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
793 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
794 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
795 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
796 *
797 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
798 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
799 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
800 */
801static inline void
802ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
803{
804 int i;
805
806 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
807 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
808 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
809 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
810 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
811 /* clear the rate counts */
812 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
813 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
814
815 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200816 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200817 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
818 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
819 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
820}
821
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400822
823/**
824 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
825 *
826 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
827 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
828 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
829 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400830 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
831 * verification has been done by the hardware.
832 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
833 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
834 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400835 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
836 * the frame.
837 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
838 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800839 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100840 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
841 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
842 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800843 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
844 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
845 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200846 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200847 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100848 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200849 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
850 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100851 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
852 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200853 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
854 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
855 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200856 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
857 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
858 * each A-MPDU
859 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
860 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
861 * monitoring purposes only
862 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
863 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
864 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
865 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
866 * on this subframe
867 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
868 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200869 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200870 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200871 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
872 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200873 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
874 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
875 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
876 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
877 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
878 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
879 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
880 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
881 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400882 */
883enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200884 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
885 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
886 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
887 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
888 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
889 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800890 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200891 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
892 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
893 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
894 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
895 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
896 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
897 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
898 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
899 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
900 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
901 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
902 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
903 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800904 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100905 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200906 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200907 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200908 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
909 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200910 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400911};
912
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200913#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
914
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400915/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200916 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
917 *
918 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
919 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
920 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
921 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ: 80+80 MHz was used
922 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200923 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200924 */
925enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
926 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
927 RX_VHT_FLAG_80P80MHZ = BIT(1),
928 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +0200929 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(3),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200930};
931
932/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400933 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
934 *
935 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
936 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200937 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200938 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +0900939 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
940 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200941 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
942 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100943 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400944 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +0200945 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
946 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
947 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200948 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
949 * values were filled.
950 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
951 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400952 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200953 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100954 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
955 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400956 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200957 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +0200958 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200959 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
960 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
961 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400962 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700963struct ieee80211_rx_status {
964 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200965 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200966 u32 ampdu_reference;
967 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200968 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +0200969 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200970 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100971 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +0200972 u8 rx_flags;
973 u8 band;
974 u8 antenna;
975 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +0200976 u8 chains;
977 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200978 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700979};
980
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400981/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400982 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
983 *
984 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
985 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +0100986 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
987 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
988 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +0200989 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
990 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
991 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
992 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
993 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
994 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
995 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +0200996 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
997 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
998 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
999 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1000 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001001 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1002 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001003 */
1004enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001005 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001006 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001007 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001008 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001009};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001010
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001011
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001012/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001013 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1014 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001015 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001016 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001017 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001018 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001019 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001020 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001021 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001022 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001023 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1024 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001025 */
1026enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001027 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001028 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001029 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001030 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001031 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1032 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1033 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001034 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001035};
1036
1037/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001038 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1039 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001040 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1041 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1042 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1043 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1044 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001045 */
1046enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1047 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1048 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1049 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1050 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1051
1052 /* keep last */
1053 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1054};
1055
1056/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001057 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1058 *
1059 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1060 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001061 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1062 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001063 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001064 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001065 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1066 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1067 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1068 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001069 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1070 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1071 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001072 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1073 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1074 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1075 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001076 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1077 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001078 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001079 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001080 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001081 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001082 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001083 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1084 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001085 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001086 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1087 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001088 *
1089 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1090 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001091 * configured for an HT channel.
1092 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1093 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001094 */
1095struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001096 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001097 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001098 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001099
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001100 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001101 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001102
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001103 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1104
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001105 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001106 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001107 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001108};
1109
1110/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001111 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1112 *
1113 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1114 * operation.
1115 *
1116 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1117 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1118 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1119 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1120 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1121 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001122 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001123 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1124 */
1125struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1126 u64 timestamp;
1127 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001128 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001129 u8 count;
1130};
1131
1132/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001133 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1134 *
1135 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1136 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001137 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1138 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1139 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1140 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001141 */
1142enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1143 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001144 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001145};
1146
1147/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001148 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1149 *
1150 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1151 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1152 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001153 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001154 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1155 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001156 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001157 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1158 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001159 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1160 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1161 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001162 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1163 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1164 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1165 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001166 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1167 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001168 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1169 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1170 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1171 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1172 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001173 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001174 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001175 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001176 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1177 * sizeof(void *).
1178 */
1179struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001180 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001181 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001182 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001183 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001184 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001185
1186 u8 cab_queue;
1187 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1188
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001189 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1190
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001191 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001192
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001193#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1194 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1195#endif
1196
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001197 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001198 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001199};
1200
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001201static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1202{
1203#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001204 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001205#endif
1206 return false;
1207}
1208
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001209/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001210 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1211 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1212 *
1213 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1214 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1215 *
1216 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1217 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1218 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1219 */
1220struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1221
1222/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001223 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1224 *
1225 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1226 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1227 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001228 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1229 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivca34e3b2014-07-29 15:38:53 +03001230 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1231 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001232 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1233 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1234 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001235 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1236 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001237 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen1f7d77a2009-01-08 13:32:10 +02001238 * CCMP key if it requires CCMP encryption of management frames (MFP) to
1239 * be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001240 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001241 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001242 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivca34e3b2014-07-29 15:38:53 +03001243 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1244 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1245 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001246 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1247 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1248 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1249 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1250 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1251 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1252 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001253 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1254 * driver for a CCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1255 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001256 */
1257enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001258 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1259 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1260 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1261 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1262 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1263 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1264 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001265};
1266
1267/**
1268 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1269 *
1270 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1271 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1272 *
1273 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1274 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001275 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001276 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001277 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1278 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1279 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001280 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1281 * data block:
1282 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1283 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1284 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001285 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1286 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001287 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001288struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001289 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001290 u8 icv_len;
1291 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001292 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001293 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001294 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001295 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001296 u8 key[0];
1297};
1298
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001299/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001300 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1301 *
1302 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1303 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1304 *
1305 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1306 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1307 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1308 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1309 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1310 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1311 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1312 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1313 * key_idx value calculation:
1314 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1315 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1316 */
1317struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1318 u32 cipher;
1319 u16 iftype;
1320 u8 hdr_len;
1321 u8 pn_len;
1322 u8 pn_off;
1323 u8 key_idx_off;
1324 u8 key_idx_mask;
1325 u8 key_idx_shift;
1326 u8 mic_len;
1327};
1328
1329/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001330 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1331 *
1332 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1333 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1334 *
1335 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1336 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1337 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001338enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001339 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001340};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001341
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001342/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001343 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1344 *
1345 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1346 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1347 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1348 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1349 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1350 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1351 */
1352enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1353 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1354 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1355 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1356 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1357 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1358 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1359};
1360
1361/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001362 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1363 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1364 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1365 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1366 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1367 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1368 *
1369 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1370 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1371 */
1372enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1373 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1374 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1375 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1376 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1377};
1378
1379/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001380 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1381 *
1382 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001383 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001384 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1385 */
1386struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1387 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1388 struct {
1389 s8 idx;
1390 u8 count;
1391 u8 count_cts;
1392 u8 count_rts;
1393 u16 flags;
1394 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1395};
1396
1397/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001398 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1399 *
1400 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1401 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1402 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1403 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1404 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001405 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001406 *
1407 * @addr: MAC address
1408 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001409 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001410 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1411 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berga74a8c82014-07-22 14:50:47 +02001412 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001413 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1414 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001415 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1416 * if wme is supported.
1417 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001418 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001419 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1420 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1421 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1422 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001423 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001424 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001425 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001426 */
1427struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001428 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001429 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1430 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001431 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001432 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001433 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001434 u8 uapsd_queues;
1435 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001436 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001437 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001438 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001439 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001440 bool tdls;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001441
1442 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001443 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001444};
1445
1446/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001447 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1448 *
1449 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301450 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001451 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001452 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1453 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1454 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001455enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001456 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1457};
1458
1459/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001460 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1461 *
1462 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1463 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1464 */
1465struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1466 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1467};
1468
1469/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001470 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1471 *
1472 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1473 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1474 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1475 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1476 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1477 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001478 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1479 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1480 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1481 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1482 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1483 * algorithm.
1484 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1485 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1486 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1487 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1488 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1489 * CCK frames.
1490 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001491 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1492 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1493 * the FCS at the end.
1494 *
1495 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1496 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1497 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1498 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1499 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1500 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001501 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001502 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001503 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1504 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1505 *
1506 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1507 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1508 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001509 *
1510 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1511 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1512 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1513 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1514 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001515 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1516 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1517 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1518 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1519 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001520 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1521 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1522 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301523 *
1524 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1525 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001526 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001527 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1528 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1529 *
1530 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1531 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1532 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1533 *
1534 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1535 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001536 *
1537 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1538 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001539 *
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001540 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD:
1541 * Hardware supports Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery
1542 * (U-APSD) in managed mode. The mode is configured with
1543 * conf_tx() operation.
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301544 *
1545 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1546 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1547 * the stack.
1548 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001549 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001550 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1551 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001552 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001553 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1554 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1555 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001556 *
1557 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1558 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1559 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1560 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1561 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1562 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001563 *
1564 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1565 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1566 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1567 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1568 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1569 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001570 *
1571 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1572 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1573 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001574 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001575 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1576 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1577 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001578 *
1579 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1580 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1581 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1582 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001583 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001584 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1585 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1586 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001587 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1588 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1589 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001590 *
1591 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1592 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001593 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001594 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1595 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1596 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1597 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001598 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1599 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1600 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1601 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001602 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001603 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1604 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1605 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001606 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1607 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001608 */
1609enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001610 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001611 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1612 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001613 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1614 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001615 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001616 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001617 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001618 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1619 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1620 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1621 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1622 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1623 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001624 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Eliad Peller0d8614b2014-09-10 14:07:36 +03001625 /* free slots */
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +02001626 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = 1<<17,
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301627 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001628 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001629 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001630 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001631 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001632 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001633 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001634 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001635 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001636 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001637 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001638 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001639 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001640};
1641
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001642/**
1643 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001644 *
1645 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1646 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1647 *
1648 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1649 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1650 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001651 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1652 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001653 *
1654 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1655 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001656 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1657 * along with this structure.
1658 *
1659 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1660 *
1661 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1662 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1663 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001664 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1665 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001666 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001667 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001668 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001669 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001670 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001671 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001672 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001673 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001674 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1675 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1676 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001677 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1678 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1679 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001680 *
1681 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1682 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001683 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1684 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001685 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1686 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001687 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001688 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1689 * can handle.
1690 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1691 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001692 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001693 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001694 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1695 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1696 * aggregation.
1697 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1698 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1699 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001700 *
1701 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1702 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1703 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001704 *
1705 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1706 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001707 *
1708 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1709 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1710 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1711 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001712 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001713 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1714 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1715 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1716 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001717 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1718 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1719 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001720 *
1721 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1722 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1723 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1724 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1725 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1726 * neither enabled.
1727 *
1728 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1729 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1730 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001731 *
1732 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1733 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1734 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001735 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001736struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001737 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001738 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001739 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001740 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001741 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001742 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001743 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001744 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001745 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001746 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001747 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001748 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001749 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001750 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001751 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001752 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001753 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001754 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001755 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001756 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001757 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001758 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001759 u8 uapsd_queues;
1760 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001761 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1762 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001763};
1764
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001765/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001766 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
1767 *
1768 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
1769 * @req: cfg80211 request.
1770 */
1771struct ieee80211_scan_request {
1772 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
1773
1774 /* Keep last */
1775 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
1776};
1777
1778/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001779 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1780 *
1781 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1782 *
1783 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1784 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1785 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1786 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1787 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001788 *
1789 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001790 */
1791struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1792
1793/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001794 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1795 *
1796 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1797 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1798 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001799static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1800{
1801 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1802}
1803
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001804/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001805 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001806 *
1807 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1808 * @addr: the address to set
1809 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001810static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1811{
1812 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1813}
1814
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001815static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1816ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001817 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001818{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001819 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001820 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001821 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001822}
1823
1824static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1825ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001826 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001827{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001828 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001829 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001830 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001831}
1832
1833static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1834ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001835 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001836{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001837 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001838 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001839 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001840}
1841
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001842/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01001843 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
1844 * @hw: the hardware
1845 * @skb: the skb
1846 *
1847 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
1848 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
1849 */
1850void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
1851
1852/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001853 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001854 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001855 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
1856 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
1857 *
1858 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
1859 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001860 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
1861 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
1862 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001863 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
1864 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
1865 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001866 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
1867 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
1868 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
1869 *
1870 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
1871 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
1872 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
1873 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
1874 *
1875 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
1876 *
1877 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
1878 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
1879 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
1880 * based on the receive flags.
1881 *
1882 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
1883 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
1884 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
1885 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001886 *
1887 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
1888 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
1889 * handler.
1890 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03001891 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001892 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
1893 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001894 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02001895 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03001896 *
1897 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
1898 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
1899 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001900 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04001901
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001902/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001903 * DOC: Powersave support
1904 *
1905 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
1906 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001907 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
1908 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
1909 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
1910 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
1911 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
1912 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
1913 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
1914 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001915 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001916 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
1917 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
1918 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001919 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
1920 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001921 *
1922 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
1923 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
1924 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001925 *
1926 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
1927 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
1928 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
1929 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001930 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
1931 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001932 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001933 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001934 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
1935 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
1936 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
1937 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
1938 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
1939 * periods.
1940 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04001941 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001942 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
1943 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
1944 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
1945 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
1946 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
1947 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
1948 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
1949 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
1950 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
1951 *
1952 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
1953 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09001954 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001955 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
1956 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
1957 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
1958 *
1959 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
1960 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001961 */
1962
1963/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001964 * DOC: Beacon filter support
1965 *
1966 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08001967 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001968 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
1969 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
1970 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
1971 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
1972 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
1973 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001974 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
1975 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02001976 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
1977 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
1978 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
1979 *
1980 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
1981 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
1982 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
1983 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
1984 *
1985 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
1986 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
1987 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
1988 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
1989 * - a list of information element IDs
1990 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
1991 *
1992 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
1993 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
1994 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
1995 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
1996 * vendor information elements.
1997 *
1998 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
1999 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2000 *
2001 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2002 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2003 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2004 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2005 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2006 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2007 *
2008 *
2009 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2010 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2011 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2012 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2013 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2014 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2015 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2016 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2017 *
2018 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2019 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2020 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002021 */
2022
2023/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002024 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2025 *
2026 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2027 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2028 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2029 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2030 *
2031 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2032 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2033 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2034 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2035 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2036 * hardware flags.
2037 *
2038 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2039 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2040 * turned off otherwise.
2041 *
2042 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2043 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2044 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2045 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2046 */
2047
2048/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002049 * DOC: Frame filtering
2050 *
2051 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2052 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2053 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2054 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2055 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2056 *
2057 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2058 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2059 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2060 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002061 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2062 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2063 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2064 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2065 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2066 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2067 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002068 *
2069 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2070 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2071 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2072 * or dropped.
2073 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002074 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2075 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2076 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2077 * the flag, but not clear it.
2078 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2079 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2080 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2081 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2082 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2083 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2084 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2085 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002086 */
2087
2088/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002089 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2090 *
2091 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2092 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2093 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2094 *
2095 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2096 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2097 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2098 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2099 * the driver code.
2100 *
2101 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2102 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2103 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2104 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2105 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2106 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2107 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2108 *
2109 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2110 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2111 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2112 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2113 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2114 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2115 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2116 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2117 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2118 * @sta_notify callback.
2119 *
2120 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2121 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2122 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2123 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2124 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2125 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2126 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002127 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002128 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2129 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2130 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2131 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2132 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2133 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2134 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002135 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2136 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2137 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002138 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2139 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2140 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2141 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2142 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2143 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2144 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2145 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2146 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2147 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2148 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2149 *
2150 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2151 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2152 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2153 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2154 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2155 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2156 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2157 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2158 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2159 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002160 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002161 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2162 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2163 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2164 *
2165 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2166 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2167 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2168 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2169 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002170 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002171 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2172 *
2173 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2174 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2175 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2176 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002177 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002178 *
2179 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2180 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2181 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2182 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002183 */
2184
2185/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002186 * DOC: HW queue control
2187 *
2188 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2189 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2190 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2191 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2192 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2193 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2194 *
2195 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2196 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2197 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2198 *
2199 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2200 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2201 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2202 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2203 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2204 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2205 * the hardware queue.
2206 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2207 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2208 *
2209 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2210 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2211 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2212 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2213 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2214 *
2215 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2216 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2217 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2218 * off-channel queue: 9
2219 *
2220 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2221 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2222 *
2223 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2224 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2225 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2226 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2227 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2228 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2229 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2230 *
2231 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2232 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2233 *
2234 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2235 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2236 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2237 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2238 */
2239
2240/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002241 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2242 *
2243 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2244 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2245 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2246 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2247 *
2248 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2249 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2250 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2251 *
2252 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2253 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2254 * multicast address.
2255 *
2256 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2257 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2258 *
2259 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2260 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2261 *
2262 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2263 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2264 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2265 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2266 * honour this flag if possible.
2267 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002268 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002269 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002270 *
2271 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002272 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002273 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2274 * those addressed to this station.
2275 *
2276 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002277 */
2278enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2279 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2280 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2281 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2282 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2283 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2284 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2285 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002286 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002287 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002288};
2289
2290/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002291 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2292 *
2293 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2294 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002295 *
2296 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2297 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002298 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002299 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2300 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002301 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2302 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2303 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002304 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002305 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2306 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2307 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2308 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2309 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2310 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2311 * session is gone and removes the station.
2312 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2313 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2314 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2315 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002316 */
2317enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2318 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2319 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002320 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002321 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2322 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2323 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002324 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002325};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002326
2327/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002328 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2329 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002330 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2331 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002332 */
2333enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2334 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002335 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002336};
2337
2338/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002339 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2340 *
2341 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002342 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2343 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2344 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002345 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002346 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2347 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2348 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002349 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2350 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002351 */
2352enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2353 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2354 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002355 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002356 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002357};
2358
2359/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002360 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2361 *
2362 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2363 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2364 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2365 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2366 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2367 *
2368 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2369 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2370 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2371 */
2372enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2373 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2374 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2375};
2376
2377/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002378 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2379 *
2380 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2381 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2382 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2383 *
2384 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2385 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2386 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002387 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002388 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002389 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002390 *
2391 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2392 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2393 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2394 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2395 * or zero.
2396 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2397 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2398 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002399 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002400 *
2401 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2402 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2403 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2404 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002405 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2406 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002407 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002408 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002409 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2410 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2411 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2412 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2413 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002414 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2415 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2416 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2417 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002418 *
2419 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2420 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2421 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2422 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2423 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2424 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002425 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2426 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2427 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2428 * in suspend().
2429 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002430 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002431 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002432 * and @stop must be implemented.
2433 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2434 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2435 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2436 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2437 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002438 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002439 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002440 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2441 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2442 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2443 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2444 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2445 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002446 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2447 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2448 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2449 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2450 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2451 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2452 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002453 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002454 *
2455 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2456 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002457 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002458 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002459 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002460 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2461 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2462 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2463 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2464 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002465 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2466 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002467 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002468 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2469 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2470 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2471 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002472 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2473 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002474 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002475 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002476 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002477 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002478 *
2479 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002480 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2481 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002482 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002483 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002484 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002485 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002486 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2487 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2488 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002489 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002490 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002491 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2492 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2493 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2494 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2495 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2496 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002497 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2498 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2499 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2500 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002501 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002502 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002503 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2504 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002505 * that power save is disabled.
2506 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2507 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2508 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2509 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2510 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2511 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2512 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002513 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002514 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002515 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2516 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2517 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2518 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2519 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2520 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2521 * The callback can sleep.
2522 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002523 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2524 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2525 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2526 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2527 *
2528 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002529 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002530 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002531 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2532 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002533 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002534 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002535 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2536 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2537 * this notification.
2538 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002539 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002540 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2541 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002542 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002543 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002544 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2545 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2546 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002547 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002548 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002549 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2550 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2551 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2552 * The callback can sleep.
2553 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002554 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002555 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002556 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002557 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2558 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2559 *
2560 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002561 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2562 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2563 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2564 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2565 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002566 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302567 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2568 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2569 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2570 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2571 *
2572 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2573 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2574 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002575 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002576 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2577 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2578 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002579 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002580 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2581 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2582 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2583 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002584 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2585 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2586 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2587 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2588 * The callback can sleep.
2589 *
2590 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2591 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2592 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2593 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2594 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002595 * The callback can sleep.
2596 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002597 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2598 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2599 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2600 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2601 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2602 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2603 * Must be atomic.
2604 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002605 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002606 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002607 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002608 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002609 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002610 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002611 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002612 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002613 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002614 *
2615 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002616 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002617 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002618 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002619 *
2620 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2621 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2622 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2623 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002624 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002625 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002626 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2627 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2628 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002629 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002630 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002631 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002632 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2633 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2634 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2635 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002636 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002637 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002638 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2639 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002640 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2641 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2642 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2643 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2644 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2645 * - TX: 1.....7
2646 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2647 * - TX: 8..1...
2648 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2649 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2650 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2651 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2652 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002653 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002654 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002655 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002656 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2657 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002658 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2659 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2660 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002661 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002662 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002663 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2664 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002665 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2666 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2667 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002668 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002669 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2670 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002671 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002672 *
2673 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002674 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2675 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2676 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2677 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002678 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002679 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002680 *
2681 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2682 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2683 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2684 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002685 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002686 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2687 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2688 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2689 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2690 *
2691 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002692 *
2693 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2694 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2695 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2696 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2697 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2698 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002699 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002700 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2701 * must be accepted in this case.
2702 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002703 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2704 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002705 *
2706 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2707 *
2708 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302709 *
2710 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2711 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302712 *
2713 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2714 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2715 * The callback can sleep.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002716 * @rssi_callback: Notify driver when the average RSSI goes above/below
2717 * thresholds that were registered previously. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002718 *
2719 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2720 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2721 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2722 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002723 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002724 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2725 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2726 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2727 * more-data bit must always be set.
2728 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2729 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002730 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2731 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2732 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2733 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2734 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2735 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002736 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2737 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2738 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002739 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2740 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002741 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002742 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002743 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002744 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2745 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2746 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002747 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002748 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2749 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2750 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2751 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002752 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002753 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002754 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2755 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2756 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002757 *
2758 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2759 *
2760 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2761 *
2762 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2763 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2764 *
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03002765 * @get_rssi: Get current signal strength in dBm, the function is optional
2766 * and can sleep.
2767 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002768 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2769 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2770 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2771 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2772 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2773 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2774 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2775 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2776 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2777 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2778 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2779 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002780 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03002781 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
2782 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
2783 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
2784 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
2785 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
2786 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
2787 * 2 * (DTIM period).
2788 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
2789 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002790 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
2791 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
2792 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
2793 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
2794 * channel context with different settings
2795 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
2796 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
2797 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
2798 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03002799 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
2800 * another, as specified in the list of
2801 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
2802 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
2803 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002804 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
2805 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
2806 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
2807 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
2808 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
2809 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
2810 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01002811 *
2812 * @restart_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw(), when the
2813 * reconfiguration has completed. This can help the driver implement the
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01002814 * reconfiguration step. Also called when reconfiguring because the
2815 * driver's resume function returned 1, as this is just like an "inline"
2816 * hardware restart. This callback may sleep.
2817 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01002818 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
2819 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
2820 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002821 *
2822 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
2823 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
2824 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002825 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002826 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
2827 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002828 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002829 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02002830 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
2831 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02002832 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02002833 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
2834 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
2835 * channel context is bound before this is called.
2836 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02002837 *
2838 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
2839 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
2840 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002841 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002842struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02002843 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2844 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
2845 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002846 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002847 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002848#ifdef CONFIG_PM
2849 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
2850 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02002851 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002852#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002853 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002855 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2856 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02002857 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002858 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01002859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02002860 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002861 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2862 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2863 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
2864 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02002865
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02002866 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2867 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2868
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002869 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00002870 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002871 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2872 unsigned int changed_flags,
2873 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002874 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002875 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2876 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04002877 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002878 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04002879 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002880 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01002881 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2882 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
2883 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2884 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002885 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2886 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2887 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002888 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2889 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02002890 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002891 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002892 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2893 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002894 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2895 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2896 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02002897 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002898 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002899 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002900 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
2901 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002902 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2903 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002904 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
2905 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002906 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002907 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002908 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2909 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
2910 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2911 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302912#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2913 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2914 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2915 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2916 struct dentry *dir);
2917 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2918 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2919 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2920 struct dentry *dir);
2921#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002922 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002923 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002924 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2925 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2926 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
2927 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002928 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2929 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2930 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002931 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2932 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2933 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2934 u32 changed);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02002935 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02002936 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002937 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03002938 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2939 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2940 u64 tsf);
2941 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002942 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002943 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01002944 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002945 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002946 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
2947 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02002948 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
2949 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002950 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002951 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002952#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002953 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2954 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002955 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
2956 struct netlink_callback *cb,
2957 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002958#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002959 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2960 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002961 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2962 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09002963 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
2964 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002965
2966 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02002967 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002968 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002969 int duration,
2970 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01002971 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002972 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
2973 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2974 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302975 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302976 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2977 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002978 void (*rssi_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Emmanuel Grumbach887da912013-01-20 17:32:41 +02002979 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07002980 enum ieee80211_rssi_event rssi_event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002981
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002982 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2983 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2984 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2985 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2986 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002987 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2988 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
2989 u16 tids, int num_frames,
2990 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
2991 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002992
2993 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2994 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
2995 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2996 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2997 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
2998 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2999 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3000 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Victor Goldenshtein66572cf2012-06-21 10:56:46 +03003001 int (*get_rssi)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3002 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, s8 *rssi_dbm);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003003
3004 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3005 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003006
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003007 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3008 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3009
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003010 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3011 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3012 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3013 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3014 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3015 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3016 u32 changed);
3017 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3018 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3019 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3020 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3021 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3022 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003023 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3024 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3025 int n_vifs,
3026 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003027
3028 void (*restart_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003029
3030#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3031 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3032 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3033 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3034#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003035 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3036 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3037 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003038
3039 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3040 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003041 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003042};
3043
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003044/**
3045 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
3046 *
3047 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3048 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3049 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3050 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3051 * @priv_data_len.
3052 *
3053 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3054 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003055 *
3056 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003057 */
3058struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
3059 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops);
3060
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003061/**
3062 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3063 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003064 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3065 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3066 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003067 *
3068 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003069 *
3070 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003071 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003072int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3073
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003074/**
3075 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3076 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3077 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3078 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3079 */
3080struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3081 int throughput;
3082 int blink_time;
3083};
3084
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003085/**
3086 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3087 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3088 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3089 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3090 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3091 */
3092enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3093 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3094 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3095 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3096};
3097
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003098#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003099char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3100char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3101char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3102char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3103char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3104 unsigned int flags,
3105 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3106 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003107#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003108/**
3109 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3110 *
3111 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3112 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3113 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3114 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3115 *
3116 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003117 *
3118 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003119 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003120static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3121{
3122#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3123 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3124#else
3125 return NULL;
3126#endif
3127}
3128
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003129/**
3130 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3131 *
3132 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3133 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3134 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3135 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3136 *
3137 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003138 *
3139 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003140 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003141static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3142{
3143#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3144 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3145#else
3146 return NULL;
3147#endif
3148}
3149
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003150/**
3151 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3152 *
3153 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3154 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3155 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3156 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3157 *
3158 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003159 *
3160 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003161 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003162static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3163{
3164#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3165 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3166#else
3167 return NULL;
3168#endif
3169}
3170
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003171/**
3172 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3173 *
3174 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3175 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3176 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3177 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3178 *
3179 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003180 *
3181 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003182 */
3183static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3184{
3185#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3186 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3187#else
3188 return NULL;
3189#endif
3190}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003191
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003192/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003193 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3194 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003195 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003196 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3197 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3198 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003199 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3200 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3201 *
3202 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003203 */
3204static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003205ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003206 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3207 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3208{
3209#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003210 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003211 blink_table_len);
3212#else
3213 return NULL;
3214#endif
3215}
3216
3217/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003218 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3219 *
3220 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3221 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3222 *
3223 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3224 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003225void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3226
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003227/**
3228 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3229 *
3230 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3231 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003232 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003233 *
3234 * @hw: the hardware to free
3235 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003236void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3237
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003238/**
3239 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3240 *
3241 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3242 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3243 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3244 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3245 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3246 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3247 *
3248 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3249 */
3250void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3251
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003252/**
3253 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3254 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3255 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3256 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3257 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3258 * @poll: poll function
3259 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003260 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003261 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003262 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003263void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3264 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3265 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3266 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003267
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003268/**
3269 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3270 *
3271 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003272 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3273 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3274 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3275 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003276 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003277 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003278 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3279 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003280 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3281 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003282 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003283 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003284 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003285 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3286 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003287 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003288void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003289
3290/**
3291 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3292 *
3293 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003294 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3295 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003296 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003297 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3298 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003299 *
3300 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3301 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003302 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003303void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003304
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003305/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003306 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3307 *
3308 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3309 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3310 *
3311 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003312 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3313 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003314 *
3315 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3316 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3317 */
3318static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3319 struct sk_buff *skb)
3320{
3321 local_bh_disable();
3322 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3323 local_bh_enable();
3324}
3325
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003326/**
3327 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3328 *
3329 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3330 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3331 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3332 *
3333 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3334 *
3335 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3336 * each other.
3337 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003338 * @sta: currently connected sta
3339 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003340 *
3341 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003342 */
3343int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3344
3345/**
3346 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3347 * (in process context)
3348 *
3349 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3350 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3351 * applies.
3352 *
3353 * @sta: currently connected sta
3354 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003355 *
3356 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003357 */
3358static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3359 bool start)
3360{
3361 int ret;
3362
3363 local_bh_disable();
3364 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3365 local_bh_enable();
3366
3367 return ret;
3368}
3369
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003370/*
3371 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3372 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3373 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003374#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003375
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003376/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003377 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003378 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003379 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3380 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003381 *
3382 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003383 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3384 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003385 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003386 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3387 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3388 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3389 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3390 *
3391 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3392 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3393 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3394 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3395 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3396 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3397 *
3398 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3399 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3400 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3401 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3402 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003403 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003404void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3405 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003406
3407/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003408 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3409 *
3410 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3411 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3412 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3413 *
3414 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3415 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3416 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3417 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3418 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3419 */
3420void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3421 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3422 struct sk_buff *skb,
3423 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3424 int max_rates);
3425
3426/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003427 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3428 *
3429 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3430 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3431 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3432 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003433 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3434 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003435 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003436 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3437 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003438 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003439 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3440 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003441 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003442void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003443 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003444
3445/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003446 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3447 *
3448 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3449 *
3450 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3451 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3452 * for a single hardware.
3453 *
3454 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3455 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3456 */
3457static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3458 struct sk_buff *skb)
3459{
3460 local_bh_disable();
3461 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3462 local_bh_enable();
3463}
3464
3465/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003466 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003467 *
3468 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3469 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3470 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003471 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3472 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003473 *
3474 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3475 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003476 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003477void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003478 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003479
3480/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003481 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3482 *
3483 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3484 * connected STA.
3485 *
3486 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3487 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3488 */
3489void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3490
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003491#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3492
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003493/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003494 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3495 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3496 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003497 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3498 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3499 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003500 */
3501struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3502 u16 tim_offset;
3503 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003504
3505 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003506};
3507
3508/**
3509 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3510 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3511 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3512 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3513 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3514 *
3515 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3516 * obtain the beacon template.
3517 *
3518 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3519 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003520 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3521 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003522 *
3523 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3524 *
3525 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3526 */
3527struct sk_buff *
3528ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3529 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3530 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3531
3532/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003533 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3534 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003535 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003536 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3537 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3538 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3539 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3540 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3541 *
3542 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003543 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003544 *
3545 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3546 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003547 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3548 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003549 *
3550 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003551 *
3552 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003553 */
3554struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3556 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3557
3558/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003559 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3560 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003561 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003562 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003563 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003564 *
3565 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003566 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003567static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3568 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3569{
3570 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3571}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003572
3573/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003574 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3575 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3576 *
3577 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3578 * This function is called implicitly when
3579 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3580 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3581 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3582 *
3583 * Return: new csa counter value
3584 */
3585u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3586
3587/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003588 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3589 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3590 *
3591 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003592 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003593 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3594 */
3595void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3596
3597/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003598 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003599 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3600 *
3601 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3602 */
3603bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3604
3605
3606/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003607 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3608 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3609 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3610 *
3611 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3612 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3613 *
3614 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003615 *
3616 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003617 */
3618struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3619 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3620
3621/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003622 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3623 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3624 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3625 *
3626 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3627 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3628 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3629 *
3630 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3631 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003632 *
3633 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003634 */
3635struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3636 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3637
3638/**
3639 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3640 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3641 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3642 *
3643 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3644 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3645 * BSSID and address is used.
3646 *
3647 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3648 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003649 *
3650 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003651 */
3652struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3653 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3654
3655/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003656 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3657 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3658 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3659 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3660 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003661 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003662 *
3663 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3664 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003665 *
3666 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003667 */
3668struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3669 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3670 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003671 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003672
3673/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003674 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3675 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003676 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003677 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3678 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003679 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003680 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3681 *
3682 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3683 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3684 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3685 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3686 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003687void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003688 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003689 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003690 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
3691
3692/**
3693 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
3694 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003695 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003696 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003697 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003698 *
3699 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3700 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3701 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003702 *
3703 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003704 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003705__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3706 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003707 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003708
3709/**
3710 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
3711 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003712 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003713 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
3714 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003715 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003716 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
3717 *
3718 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3719 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3720 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3721 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
3722 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003723void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3724 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003725 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003726 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003727 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
3728
3729/**
3730 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
3731 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003732 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003733 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003734 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003735 *
3736 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
3737 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3738 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003739 *
3740 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003741 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003742__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3743 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003744 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003745 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003746
3747/**
3748 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
3749 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003750 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003751 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003752 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003753 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003754 *
3755 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
3756 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003757 *
3758 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003759 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003760__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3761 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02003762 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003763 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003764 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003765
3766/**
3767 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
3768 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003769 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003770 *
3771 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
3772 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
3773 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
3774 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003775 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
3776 *
3777 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
3778 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003779 *
3780 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
3781 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
3782 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
3783 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
3784 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
3785 * use common code for all beacons.
3786 */
3787struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003788ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003789
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003790/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003791 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
3792 *
3793 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
3794 *
3795 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3796 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3797 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3798 */
3799void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3800 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3801
3802/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003803 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003804 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003805 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
3806 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003807 *
3808 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003809 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
3810 * with this P1K
3811 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02003812 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02003813static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3814 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
3815{
3816 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
3817 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
3818 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
3819
3820 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
3821}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003822
3823/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02003824 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
3825 *
3826 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
3827 * and transmitter address.
3828 *
3829 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3830 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
3831 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
3832 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
3833 */
3834void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3835 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
3836
3837/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02003838 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
3839 *
3840 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
3841 * in the packet.
3842 *
3843 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3844 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
3845 * encrypted with this key
3846 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
3847 */
3848void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3849 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003850
3851/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03003852 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
3853 *
3854 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
3855 * previously installed master key.
3856 *
3857 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3858 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
3859 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
3860 */
3861void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3862 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
3863
3864/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02003865 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
3866 *
3867 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
3868 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3869 * reverse order than in packet)
3870 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
3871 * reverse order than in packet)
3872 */
3873struct ieee80211_key_seq {
3874 union {
3875 struct {
3876 u32 iv32;
3877 u16 iv16;
3878 } tkip;
3879 struct {
3880 u8 pn[6];
3881 } ccmp;
3882 struct {
3883 u8 pn[6];
3884 } aes_cmac;
3885 };
3886};
3887
3888/**
3889 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
3890 *
3891 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3892 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3893 *
3894 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
3895 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
3896 * offloaded to the device.
3897 *
3898 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3899 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
3900 * and the stop has been synchronized.
3901 */
3902void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3903 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3904
3905/**
3906 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
3907 *
3908 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3909 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3910 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3911 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3912 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
3913 *
3914 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
3915 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
3916 * by the device and not by mac80211.
3917 *
3918 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3919 * can be done concurrently.
3920 */
3921void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3922 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3923
3924/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02003925 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
3926 *
3927 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3928 * @seq: new sequence data
3929 *
3930 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
3931 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
3932 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
3933 * ARP requests.
3934 *
3935 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
3936 * can be done concurrently.
3937 */
3938void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3939 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3940
3941/**
3942 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
3943 *
3944 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3945 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP only);
3946 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
3947 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
3948 * @seq: new sequence data
3949 *
3950 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
3951 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
3952 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
3953 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
3954 *
3955 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
3956 * can be done concurrently.
3957 */
3958void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
3959 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3960
3961/**
3962 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
3963 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
3964 *
3965 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
3966 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
3967 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
3968 *
3969 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
3970 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
3971 */
3972void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
3973
3974/**
3975 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
3976 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
3977 * @keyconf: new key data
3978 *
3979 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
3980 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
3981 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
3982 *
3983 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
3984 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
3985 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
3986 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
3987 *
3988 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
3989 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
3990 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
3991 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
3992 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
3993 * of the reconfiguration.
3994 *
3995 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
3996 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
3997 *
3998 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
3999 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4000 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4001 * the key that's being replaced.
4002 */
4003struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4004ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4005 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4006
4007/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004008 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4009 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4010 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4011 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4012 * @gfp: allocation flags
4013 */
4014void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4015 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4016
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004017/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004018 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4019 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4020 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4021 *
4022 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4023 */
4024void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4025
4026/**
4027 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4028 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4029 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4030 *
4031 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4032 */
4033void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4034
4035/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004036 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4037 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4038 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4039 *
4040 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004041 *
4042 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004043 */
4044
4045int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4046
4047/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004048 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4049 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4050 *
4051 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4052 */
4053void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4054
4055/**
4056 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4057 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4058 *
4059 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4060 */
4061void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4062
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004063/**
4064 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4065 *
4066 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4067 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004068 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4069 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004070 *
4071 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004072 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004073 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004074void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004075
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004076/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004077 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4078 *
4079 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4080 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4081 *
4082 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4083 */
4084void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4085
4086/**
4087 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4088 *
4089 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4090 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4091 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4092 * while associating, for instance.
4093 *
4094 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4095 */
4096void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4097
4098/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004099 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4100 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4101 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4102 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4103 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4104 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4105 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4106 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4107 */
4108enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4109 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4110 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
4111};
4112
4113/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004114 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004115 *
4116 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4117 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004118 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4119 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4120 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004121 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004122 *
4123 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004124 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004125 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004126 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4127 */
4128void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004129 u32 iter_flags,
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004130 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004131 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004132 void *data);
4133
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004134/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004135 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4136 *
4137 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4138 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4139 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4140 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004141 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004142 *
4143 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004144 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004145 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4146 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4147 */
4148void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004149 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004150 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4151 u8 *mac,
4152 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4153 void *data);
4154
4155/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004156 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4157 *
4158 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4159 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4160 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4161 *
4162 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4163 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4164 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4165 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4166 */
4167void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4168 u32 iter_flags,
4169 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4170 u8 *mac,
4171 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4172 void *data);
4173
4174/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004175 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4176 *
4177 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4178 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4179 *
4180 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4181 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4182 */
4183void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4184
4185/**
4186 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4187 *
4188 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4189 * workqueue.
4190 *
4191 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4192 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4193 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4194 */
4195void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4196 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4197 unsigned long delay);
4198
4199/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004200 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004201 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004202 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304203 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004204 *
4205 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004206 *
4207 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4208 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4209 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4210 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304211int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4212 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004213
4214/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004215 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004216 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004217 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4218 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4219 *
4220 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004221 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4222 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004223 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004224void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004225 u16 tid);
4226
4227/**
4228 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004229 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004230 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004231 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004232 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004233 *
4234 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4235 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4236 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4237 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004238int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004239
4240/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004241 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004242 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004243 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4244 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4245 *
4246 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004247 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4248 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004249 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004250void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004251 u16 tid);
4252
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004253/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004254 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4255 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004256 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004257 * @addr: station's address
4258 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004259 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4260 *
4261 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004262 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4263 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004264struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004265 const u8 *addr);
4266
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004267/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004268 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004269 *
4270 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004271 * @addr: remote station's address
4272 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004273 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004274 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4275 *
4276 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004277 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4278 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004279 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4280 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4281 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4282 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4283 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4284 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4285 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004286 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004287 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004288 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004289struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4290 const u8 *addr,
4291 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004292
4293/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004294 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4295 * @hw: the hardware
4296 * @pubsta: the station
4297 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4298 *
4299 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4300 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4301 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4302 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4303 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4304 *
4305 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4306 * manner.
4307 *
4308 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4309 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4310 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4311 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4312 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4313 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4314 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4315 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4316 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4317 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4318 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4319 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4320 * woke up while blocked or not.
4321 */
4322void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4323 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4324
4325/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004326 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4327 * @pubsta: the station
4328 *
4329 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4330 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4331 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4332 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4333 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004334 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4335 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4336 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4337 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4338 *
4339 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4340 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4341 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4342 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004343 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004344void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004345
4346/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004347 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4348 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4349 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4350 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4351 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4352 *
4353 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4354 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4355 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4356 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4357 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4358 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004359 *
4360 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4361 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4362 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004363 */
4364void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4365 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4366 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4367 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4368 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4369 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4370 void *data),
4371 void *iter_data);
4372
4373/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004374 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4375 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4376 * @iter: iterator function
4377 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4378 *
4379 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4380 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4381 * places while calling into the driver.
4382 *
4383 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4384 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4385 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004386 *
4387 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4388 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4389 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4390 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004391 */
4392void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4393 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4394 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4395 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4396 void *data),
4397 void *iter_data);
4398
4399/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004400 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4401 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4402 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4403 *
4404 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4405 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4406 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4407 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4408 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004409 * %NULL.
4410 *
4411 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004412 */
4413struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4414 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4415
4416/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004417 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4418 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004419 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004420 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004421 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004422 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004423 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4424 */
4425void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004426
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004427/**
4428 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4429 *
4430 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4431 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004432 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004433 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4434 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004435 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4436 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004437 *
4438 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4439 * without connection recovery attempts.
4440 */
4441void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4442
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004443/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004444 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4445 *
4446 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4447 *
4448 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4449 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4450 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4451 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4452 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4453 *
4454 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4455 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4456 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4457 * disconnect normally later.
4458 *
4459 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4460 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4461 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4462 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4463 */
4464void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4465
4466/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004467 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4468 * rssi threshold triggered
4469 *
4470 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4471 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4472 * @gfp: context flags
4473 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004474 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004475 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4476 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4477 */
4478void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4479 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4480 gfp_t gfp);
4481
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004482/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004483 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4484 *
4485 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4486 */
4487void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4488
4489/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004490 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4491 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4492 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4493 *
4494 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4495 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4496 */
4497void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4498
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004499/**
4500 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4501 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004502 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004503 *
4504 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4505 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4506 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4507 */
4508void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4509 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4510
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004511/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004512 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4513 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4514 */
4515void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4516
4517/**
4518 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4519 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4520 */
4521void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4522
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004523/**
4524 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4525 *
4526 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4527 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4528 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4529 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4530 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4531 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4532 *
4533 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4534 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4535 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4536 */
4537void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4538 const u8 *addr);
4539
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004540/**
4541 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4542 *
4543 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4544 * buffer.
4545 *
4546 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4547 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4548 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4549 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4550 */
4551void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4552
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02004553/**
4554 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
4555 *
4556 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4557 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4558 * reordering.
4559 *
4560 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4561 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
4562 *
4563 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4564 * @addr: station mac address
4565 * @tid: the rx tid
4566 */
4567void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4568 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4569
4570/**
4571 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
4572 *
4573 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4574 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4575 * reordering.
4576 *
4577 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4578 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
4579 *
4580 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4581 * @addr: station mac address
4582 * @tid: the rx tid
4583 */
4584void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4585 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4586
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004587/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004588
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004589/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004590 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004591 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004592 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4593 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4594 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004595 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4596 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004597 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4598 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4599 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4600 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4601 * RTS threshold
4602 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4603 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004604 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004605 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4606 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004607 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004608 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004609 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004610 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004611struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4612 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4613 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4614 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4615 struct sk_buff *skb;
4616 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4617 bool rts, short_preamble;
4618 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004619 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004620 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004621 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004622};
4623
4624struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004625 const char *name;
4626 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004627 void (*free)(void *priv);
4628
4629 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
4630 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004631 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004632 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05304633 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02004634 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02004635 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4636 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004637 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4638 void *priv_sta);
4639
4640 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4641 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4642 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004643 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
4644 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004645
4646 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
4647 struct dentry *dir);
4648 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02004649
4650 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004651};
4652
4653static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4654 enum ieee80211_band band,
4655 int index)
4656{
4657 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
4658}
4659
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07004660/**
4661 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
4662 *
4663 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
4664 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
4665 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
4666 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
4667 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
4668 * not null.
4669 *
4670 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
4671 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
4672 *
4673 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
4674 * that this may be null.
4675 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
4676 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
4677 */
4678bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4679 void *priv_sta,
4680 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
4681
4682
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004683static inline s8
4684rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4685 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4686{
4687 int i;
4688
4689 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4690 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4691 return i;
4692
4693 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004694 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004695
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01004696 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004697 return 0;
4698}
4699
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07004700static inline
4701bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
4702 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
4703{
4704 unsigned int i;
4705
4706 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
4707 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
4708 return true;
4709 return false;
4710}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004711
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004712/**
4713 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
4714 *
4715 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
4716 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
4717 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
4718 * the most recent rate control module decision.
4719 *
4720 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4721 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
4722 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
4723 */
4724int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4725 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4726 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
4727
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01004728int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
4729void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004730
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004731static inline bool
4732conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4733{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004734 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004735}
4736
4737static inline bool
4738conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4739{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004740 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4741 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004742}
4743
4744static inline bool
4745conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4746{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004747 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
4748 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004749}
4750
4751static inline bool
4752conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4753{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01004754 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004755}
4756
4757static inline bool
4758conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
4759{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02004760 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
4761 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
4762 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08004763}
4764
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02004765static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4766ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
4767{
4768 if (p2p) {
4769 switch (type) {
4770 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
4771 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
4772 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
4773 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
4774 default:
4775 break;
4776 }
4777 }
4778 return type;
4779}
4780
4781static inline enum nl80211_iftype
4782ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4783{
4784 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
4785}
4786
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07004787void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4788 int rssi_min_thold,
4789 int rssi_max_thold);
4790
4791void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03004792
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004793/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004794 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004795 *
4796 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
4797 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004798 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
4799 *
4800 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
4801 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07004802 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07004803int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4804
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01004805/**
4806 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
4807 * @vif: virtual interface
4808 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
4809 * @gfp: allocation flags
4810 *
4811 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
4812 */
4813void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4814 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
4815 gfp_t gfp);
4816
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02004817/**
4818 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
4819 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4820 * @vif: virtual interface
4821 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
4822 * @band: the band to transmit on
4823 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
4824 *
4825 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
4826 */
4827bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4828 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
4829 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
4830
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01004831/**
4832 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
4833 *
4834 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
4835 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
4836 *
4837 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
4838 *
4839 * private:
4840 *
4841 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
4842 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
4843 */
4844struct ieee80211_noa_data {
4845 u32 next_tsf;
4846 bool has_next_tsf;
4847
4848 u8 absent;
4849
4850 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4851 struct {
4852 u32 start;
4853 u32 duration;
4854 u32 interval;
4855 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
4856};
4857
4858/**
4859 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
4860 *
4861 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
4862 * @data: NoA tracking data
4863 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4864 *
4865 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
4866 */
4867int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
4868 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4869
4870/**
4871 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
4872 *
4873 * @data: NoA tracking data
4874 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
4875 */
4876void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
4877
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03004878/**
4879 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
4880 * @vif: virtual interface
4881 * @peer: the peer's destination address
4882 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
4883 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
4884 * @gfp: allocation flags
4885 *
4886 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
4887 */
4888void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
4889 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
4890 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004891#endif /* MAC80211_H */